blob: 668e22f46f44f25ab2258312b4f5528ad6f19b17 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000019#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000021#include "llvm/ADT/SmallSet.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000022#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
23#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000024#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000027#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000028#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000029#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000030#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000032#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000033#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000034#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000035#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
Andrea Di Biagiof20c57e2016-12-15 20:01:26 +000037#include "llvm/IR/DebugInfo.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000038#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000039#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000040#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
41#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
43#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000044#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
45#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000046#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000047#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
48#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
49#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
50#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000051#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000052#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000053#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000054#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000055#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
56#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
Robert Loughercf176742016-12-15 16:17:53 +000057#include "llvm/IR/DebugInfo.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000058#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000059#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000060#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000061#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
62#include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000063#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000064#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000065#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000066#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000067#include <algorithm>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000068#include <cassert>
69#include <climits>
70#include <cstddef>
71#include <cstdint>
72#include <iterator>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000073#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000074#include <set>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000075#include <utility>
76#include <vector>
77
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000078using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000079using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000080
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000081#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
82
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000083// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
84// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
85// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
86// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000087static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
88 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
89 cl::desc(
90 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
91
92static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
93 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
94 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000095
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000096static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000097 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
98 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000099
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +0000100static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
101 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
102 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000103
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +0000104static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
105 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
106 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
107 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
108 "predicated store"));
109
110static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
111 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
112 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
113 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
114
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000115static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
116 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
117 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
118 "executed"));
119
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000120static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
121 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
122 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
123 "speculatively executed instructions"));
124
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000125STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000126STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
127 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
128STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
129 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
130STATISTIC(
131 NumLookupTablesHoles,
132 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000133STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000134STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
135 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000136STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000137
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000138namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000139
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000140// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
141// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
142// cases composing the case group.
143typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000144 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000145// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
146// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
147// switch for that PHI.
148typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000149
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000150/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
151struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
152 ConstantInt *Value;
153 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000154
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000155 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000156 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
157
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000158 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
159 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
160 return Value < RHS.Value;
161 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000162
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000163 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
164};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000165
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000166class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000167 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000168 const DataLayout &DL;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000169 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000170 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000171 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000172 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
173 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000174 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000175 BasicBlock *Pred,
176 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000177 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
178 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000179
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000180 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000181 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000182 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
183 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000184 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000185 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000186 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000187 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000188 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
189 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000190
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000191public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000192 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +0000193 unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000194 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders)
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +0000195 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold),
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000196 LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders) {}
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000197
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000198 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
199};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000200
201} // end anonymous namespace
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000202
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000203/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000204/// terminator instructions together.
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000205static bool
206SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2,
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000207 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000208 if (SI1 == SI2)
209 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000210
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000211 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
212 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
213 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
214 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
215 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
James Molloy3c1137c2016-08-31 13:32:28 +0000216
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000217 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
218 bool Fail = false;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000219 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
220 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
221 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000222 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
223 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000224 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
225 if (FailBlocks)
226 FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
227 Fail = true;
228 }
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000229 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000230
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000231 return !Fail;
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000232}
233
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000234/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
235/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
236/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000237static bool
238isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
239 Instruction *Cond,
240 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
241 if (SI1 == SI2)
242 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000243 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
244
245 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000246 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000247 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
248 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
249 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
250 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000251 if (!Ci2)
252 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000253 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
254 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
255 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
256 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
257 return false;
258
259 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
260 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000261 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000262 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
263 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
264 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000265 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
266 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000267 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000268 return false;
269 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
270 }
271 return true;
272}
273
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000274/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
275/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
276/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
277/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000278static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
279 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000280 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin()))
281 return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000282
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000283 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000284 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000285 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000286}
287
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000288/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
289/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
290/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000291/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000292static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000293 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000294 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000295 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000296 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000297}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000298
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000299/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
300/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000301/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
302/// which works well enough for us.
303///
304/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000305/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
306/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
307/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
308/// set and true is returned.
309///
310/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
311/// Select whose cost is 2.
312///
313/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
314/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
315/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000316static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000317 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000318 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000319 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
320 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000321 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
322 // so limit the recursion depth.
323 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
324 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
325 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
326 return false;
327
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000328 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000329 if (!I) {
330 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
331 // can be executed unconditionally.
332 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
333 if (C->canTrap())
334 return false;
335 return true;
336 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000337 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000338
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000339 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000340 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000341 if (PBB == BB)
342 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000343
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000344 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
345 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000346 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
347 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000348 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000349 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000350
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000351 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
352 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000353 if (!AggressiveInsts)
354 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000355
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000356 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000357 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
358 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000359
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000360 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
361 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
362 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000363 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000364 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000365
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000366 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000367
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000368 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
369 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
370 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
371 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
372 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
373 // enabled further IR optimizations.
374 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
375 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000376 return false;
377
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000378 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
379 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000380
381 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
382 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000383 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000384 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
385 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000386 return false;
387 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
388 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000389 return true;
390}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000391
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000392/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000393/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000394static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000395 // Normal constant int.
396 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000397 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000398 return CI;
399
400 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
401 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000402 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000403
404 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
405 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
406 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
407
408 // IntToPtr const int.
409 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
410 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
411 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
412 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
413 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
414 return CI;
415 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000416 return cast<ConstantInt>(
417 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000418 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000419 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000420}
421
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000422namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000423
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000424/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
425/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
426/// structure.
427/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
428/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
429/// representing the different cases for the switch.
430/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
431/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
432/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
433/// fail.
434struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000435 const DataLayout &DL;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000436 Value *CompValue; /// Value found for the switch comparison
437 Value *Extra; /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
438 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals; /// Set of integers to match in switch
439 unsigned UsedICmps; /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000440
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000441 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000442 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL)
443 : DL(DL), CompValue(nullptr), Extra(nullptr), UsedICmps(0) {
444 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000445 }
446
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000447 /// Prevent copy
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000448 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000449 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000450 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000451
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000452private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000453 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
454 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
455 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000456 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
457 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000458 CompValue = NewVal;
459 return (CompValue != nullptr);
460 }
461
462 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
463 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
464 /// match depending on isEQ).
465 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
466 /// against is placed in CompValue.
467 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
468 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000469 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000470 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
471 ICmpInst *ICI;
472 ConstantInt *C;
473 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000474 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000475 return false;
476 }
477
478 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000479 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000480
481 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000482 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000483 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000484 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000485
486 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
487 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
488
489 /*
490 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
491 x : BITVECTOR(64);
492 y : BITVECTOR(64);
493 z : BITVECTOR(64);
494 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
495 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
496 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
497 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000498 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
499 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
500 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000501 */
502
503 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
504 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
505 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
506 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
507 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
508 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
509 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
510
511 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
512 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
513 //
514 // mask = (1 << z)
515 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
516 //
517 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
518 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
519
520 // Pattern match a special case:
521 /*
522 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
523 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
524 );
525 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000526 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000527 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
528 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000529 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000530 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000531 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000532 return false;
533
534 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000535 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000536 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
537 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000538 UsedICmps++;
539 return true;
540 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000541 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000542
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000543 // Pattern match a special case:
544 /*
545 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
546 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
547 );
548 */
549 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
550 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
551 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
552 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
553 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
554 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
555 return false;
556
557 Vals.push_back(C);
558 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
559 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
560 UsedICmps++;
561 return true;
562 }
563 }
564
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000565 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000566 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000567 return false;
568
569 UsedICmps++;
570 Vals.push_back(C);
571 return ICI->getOperand(0);
572 }
573
574 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000575 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
576 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000577
578 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
579 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
580 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000581 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
582 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000583 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
584 }
585
586 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
587 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
588 // x != 0 && x != 1.
589 if (!isEQ)
590 Span = Span.inverse();
591
592 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
593 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
594 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000595 }
596
597 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000598 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000599 return false;
600
601 // Add all values from the range to the set
602 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
603 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000604
605 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000606 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000607 }
608
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000609 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000610 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
611 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
612 /// vector.
613 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000614 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000615 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
616 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000617
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000618 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
619 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000620 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000621
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000622 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000623 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000624 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000625
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000626 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000627 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000628
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000629 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
630 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
631 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000632 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
633 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
634 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
635 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000636 continue;
637 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000638
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000639 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000640 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000641 // Match succeed, continue the loop
642 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000643 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000644
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000645 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
646 // comparison against the same value as the others.
647 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
648 if (!Extra) {
649 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000650 continue;
651 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000652 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
653 CompValue = nullptr;
654 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000655 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000656 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000657};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000658
659} // end anonymous namespace
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000660
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000661static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000662 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000663 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
664 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
665 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
666 if (BI->isConditional())
667 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000668 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
669 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000670 }
671
672 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000673 if (Cond)
674 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000675}
676
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000677/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000678/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000679Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000680 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000681 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
682 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
683 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000684 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
685 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <=
686 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000687 CV = SI->getCondition();
688 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000689 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000690 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000691 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000692 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000693 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000694
695 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000696 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000697 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
698 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000699 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000700 CV = Ptr;
701 }
702 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000703 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000704}
705
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000706/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000707/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000708BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
709 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000710 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000711 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000712 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
713 ++i)
714 Cases.push_back(
715 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(), i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000716 return SI->getDefaultDest();
717 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000718
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000719 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000720 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000721 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000722 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
723 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000724 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000725}
726
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000727/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000728/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000729static void
730EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
731 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000732 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000733}
734
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000735/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000736static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
737 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000738 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
739
740 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
741 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
742 std::swap(V1, V2);
743
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000744 if (V1->empty())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000745 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000746 if (V1->size() == 1) {
747 // Just scan V2.
748 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
749 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
750 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
751 return true;
752 }
753
754 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
755 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
756 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
757 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
758 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
759 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
760 return true;
761 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
762 ++i1;
763 else
764 ++i2;
765 }
766 return false;
767}
768
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000769/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
770/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
771/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
772/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
773/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000774bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
775 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000776 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000777 if (!PredVal)
778 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000779
780 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
781 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000782 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
783 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000784
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000785 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
786 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
787
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000788 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000789 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000790 BasicBlock *PredDef =
791 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
792 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000793
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000794 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000795 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000796 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000797 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000798
799 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
800 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
801 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
802 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
803 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
804 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000805 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000806 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000807
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000808 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
809 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
810 // uncond br.
811 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
812 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000813 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000814 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000815
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000816 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000817 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000818
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000819 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000820 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
821 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000822
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000823 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
824 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000825 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000826
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000827 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
828 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000829 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000830 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
831 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000832
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000833 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000834 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000835
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000836 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
837 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000838 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000839 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
840 if (HasWeight)
841 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
842 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000843 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000844 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
845 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000846 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
847 --i;
848 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000849 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000850 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000851 Weights.pop_back();
852 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000853 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
854 SI->removeCase(i);
855 }
856 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000857 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000858 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000859 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
860 .createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000861
862 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000863 return true;
864 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000865
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000866 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
867 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000868 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000869 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000870 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
871 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000872 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000873 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000874 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
875 }
876 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000877
878 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
879 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000880 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000881 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
882 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
883 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
884 break;
885 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000886
887 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000888 if (!TheRealDest)
889 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000890
891 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
892 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000893 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
894 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
895 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000896 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000897 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000898
899 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000900 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000901 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000902
903 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000904 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
905 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000906
907 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
908 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000909}
910
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000911namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000912
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000913/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
914/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
915/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
916struct ConstantIntOrdering {
917 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
918 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
919 }
920};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000921
922} // end anonymous namespace
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000923
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000924static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
925 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
926 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
927 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000928 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000929 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000930 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000931}
932
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000933static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000934 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000935 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000936 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000937 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
938
939 return false;
940}
941
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000942/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
943/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
944/// metadata.
945static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
946 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000947 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000948 assert(MD);
949 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000950 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000951 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000952 }
953
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000954 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
955 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
956 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000957 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000958 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
959 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
960 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
961 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000962 }
963}
964
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000965/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000966static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000967 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
968 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
969 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
970 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
971 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000972 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000973}
974
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000975/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
976/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000977/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
978/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000979bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
980 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000981 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000982 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000983 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
984 bool Changed = false;
985
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000986 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000987 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000988 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000989
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000990 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
991 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000992 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000993
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000994 if (PCV == CV && TI != PTI) {
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000995 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 4> FailBlocks;
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000996 if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
997 for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
998 std::vector<BasicBlock*> Blocks = { TI->getParent() };
999 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, Blocks, ".fold.split"))
1000 return false;
1001 }
1002 }
1003
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001004 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001005 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001006 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
1007
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001008 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001009 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
1010
1011 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
1012 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
1013 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001014 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001015
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001016 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
1017 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001018 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
1019 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
1020
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001021 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001022 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001023 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001024 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
1025 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1026 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001027 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
1028 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
1029 // successor's weights
1030 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001031
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001032 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001033 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001034 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001035 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001036 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1037 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1038 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001039 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001040
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001041 if (PredDefault == BB) {
1042 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1043 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001044 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001045 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1046 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1047 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1048 else {
1049 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1050 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001051
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001052 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1053 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001054 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1055 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001056 Weights.pop_back();
1057 }
1058
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001059 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001060 --i;
1061 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001062 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001063
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001064 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001065 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1066 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1067 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1068 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1069 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001070
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001071 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1072 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001073 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1074 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1075 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1076 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1077 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001078 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1079 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1080 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1081 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001082 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1083 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001084 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001085 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001086
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001087 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1088 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1089 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1090 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1091 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1092 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1093 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1094 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001095 } else {
1096 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1097 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1098 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001099 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1100 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001101 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1102 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1103 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001104
1105 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001106 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1107 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001108 Weights.pop_back();
1109 }
1110
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001111 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1112 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001113 --i;
1114 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001115 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001116
1117 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1118 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001119 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1120 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1121 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001122 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1123 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001124 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1125 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001126 PTIHandled.erase(
1127 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001128 }
1129
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001130 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1131 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001132 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001133 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001134 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1135 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001136 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001137 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001138 }
1139
1140 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1141 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1142 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001143 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1144 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001145
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001146 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001147 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001148 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001149 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001150 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001151 }
1152
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001153 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001154 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1155 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001156 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001157 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1158 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001159
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001160 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1161 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1162 FitWeights(Weights);
1163
1164 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1165
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001166 NewSI->setMetadata(
1167 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
1168 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001169 }
1170
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001171 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001172
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001173 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1174 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1175 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001176 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001177 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1178 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001179 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001180 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001181 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001182 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1183 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001184 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001185 }
1186 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1187 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001188
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001189 Changed = true;
1190 }
1191 }
1192 return Changed;
1193}
1194
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001195// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1196// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1197// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001198static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1199 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001200 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001201 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001202 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001203 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1204 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1205 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001206 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001207 return false;
1208 }
1209 }
1210 }
1211 return true;
1212}
1213
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001214static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1215
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001216/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1217/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1218/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001219static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001220 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001221 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1222 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1223 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1224 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1225 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001226 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1227 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001228
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001229 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1230 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1231
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001232 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001233 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1234 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1235 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1236 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1237 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001238 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001239 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001240 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001241 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001242 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001243 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001244 return false;
1245
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001246 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001247
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001248 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001249 do {
1250 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1251 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1252 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1253 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001254
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001255 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1256 return Changed;
1257
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001258 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1259 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1260 // the now redundant second instruction.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001261 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), BB1->getInstList(), I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001262 if (!I2->use_empty())
1263 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Peter Collingbourne8f1dd5c2016-09-07 23:39:04 +00001264 I1->andIRFlags(I2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001265 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1266 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1267 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1268 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1269 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1270 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1271 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1272 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1273 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1274 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001275 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001276
1277 // If the debug loc for I1 and I2 are different, as we are combining them
1278 // into one instruction, we do not want to select debug loc randomly from
Andrea Di Biagiof20c57e2016-12-15 20:01:26 +00001279 // I1 or I2.
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001280 if (!isa<CallInst>(I1) && I1->getDebugLoc() != I2->getDebugLoc())
Andrea Di Biagiof20c57e2016-12-15 20:01:26 +00001281 I1->setDebugLoc(
1282 DILocation::getMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc()));
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001283
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001284 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001285 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001286
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001287 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1288 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001289 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1290 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1291 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1292 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1293 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001294 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001295 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001296 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001297 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001298 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001299
1300 return true;
1301
1302HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001303 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1304 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001305 return Changed;
1306
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001307 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001308 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001309 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001310 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1311 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1312 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1313 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1314 continue;
1315
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001316 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1317 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1318 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1319 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001320 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001321
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001322 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001323 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001324 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001325 return Changed;
1326 }
1327 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001328
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001329 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001330 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001331 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001332 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001333 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1334 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001335 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001336 }
1337
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001338 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001339 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1340 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1341 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1342 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001343 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001344 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001345 PHINode *PN;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001346 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001347 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001348 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1349 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001350 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1351 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001352
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001353 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1354 // that determines the right value.
1355 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001356 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001357 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1358 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1359 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001360
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001361 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1362 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1363 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1364 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001365 }
1366 }
1367
1368 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001369 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1370 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001371
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001372 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001373 return true;
1374}
1375
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001376// Is it legal to place a variable in operand \c OpIdx of \c I?
1377// FIXME: This should be promoted to Instruction.
1378static bool canReplaceOperandWithVariable(const Instruction *I,
1379 unsigned OpIdx) {
Hal Finkelac5803b2016-09-07 21:38:22 +00001380 // We can't have a PHI with a metadata type.
1381 if (I->getOperand(OpIdx)->getType()->isMetadataTy())
1382 return false;
1383
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001384 // Early exit.
1385 if (!isa<Constant>(I->getOperand(OpIdx)))
1386 return true;
1387
1388 switch (I->getOpcode()) {
1389 default:
1390 return true;
1391 case Instruction::Call:
1392 case Instruction::Invoke:
1393 // FIXME: many arithmetic intrinsics have no issue taking a
1394 // variable, however it's hard to distingish these from
1395 // specials such as @llvm.frameaddress that require a constant.
Sanjoy Dasbc357e82016-10-12 18:15:33 +00001396 if (isa<IntrinsicInst>(I))
1397 return false;
1398
1399 // Constant bundle operands may need to retain their constant-ness for
1400 // correctness.
1401 if (ImmutableCallSite(I).isBundleOperand(OpIdx))
1402 return false;
1403
1404 return true;
1405
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001406 case Instruction::ShuffleVector:
1407 // Shufflevector masks are constant.
1408 return OpIdx != 2;
1409 case Instruction::ExtractValue:
1410 case Instruction::InsertValue:
1411 // All operands apart from the first are constant.
1412 return OpIdx == 0;
1413 case Instruction::Alloca:
1414 return false;
1415 case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
1416 if (OpIdx == 0)
1417 return true;
1418 gep_type_iterator It = std::next(gep_type_begin(I), OpIdx - 1);
Peter Collingbourneab85225b2016-12-02 02:24:42 +00001419 return It.isSequential();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001420 }
1421}
1422
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001423// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1424// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1425// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1426// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1427// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1428static bool canSinkInstructions(
1429 ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1430 DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001431 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1432 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1433 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1434 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1435 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1436 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1437 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1438 return false;
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001439 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1440 // have no uses.
1441 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1442 return false;
1443 }
1444
1445 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1446 for (auto *I : Insts)
1447 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1448 return false;
1449
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001450 // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they aren't
1451 // stores, check the only user of each is a PHI or in the same block as the
1452 // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction
1453 // we're contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001454 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1455 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001456 auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1457 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001458 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
James Molloybf1837d2016-09-07 08:15:54 +00001459 return (PNUse &&
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001460 PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
James Molloybf1837d2016-09-07 08:15:54 +00001461 PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1462 U->getParent() == I->getParent();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001463 }))
1464 return false;
1465 }
1466
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001467 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1468 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1469 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1470 return false;
James Molloy104370a2016-09-11 09:00:03 +00001471
1472 // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not
1473 // to sink loads or stores of allocas when we'd have to create a PHI for
1474 // the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or stores
1475 // of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink them.
1476 // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1477 // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1478 // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1479 // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1480 if (OI == 1 && isa<StoreInst>(I0) &&
1481 any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1482 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1));
1483 }))
1484 return false;
1485 if (OI == 0 && isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1486 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0));
1487 }))
1488 return false;
1489
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001490 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001491 assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1492 return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001493 };
1494 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1495 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1496 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1497 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001498 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
1499 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001500 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1501 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001502 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001503 for (auto *I : Insts)
1504 PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001505 }
1506 }
1507 return true;
1508}
1509
1510// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1511// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1512// into one instruction.
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001513static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001514 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1515
1516 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1517 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1518 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001519 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1520 Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1521 do {
1522 I = I->getPrevNode();
1523 } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1524 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1525 Insts.push_back(I);
1526 }
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001527
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001528 // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1529 // are the same PHI node. canSinkLastInstruction should have checked this but
1530 // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative instructions
1531 // so double-check it here.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001532 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001533 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1534 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1535 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1536 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1537 return U == PNUse;
1538 }))
1539 return false;
1540 }
1541
1542 // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should
1543 // have done it all for us.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001544 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1545 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1546 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1547 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1548 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1549 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1550 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1551 // small mess we may make.
1552 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1553 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1554 });
1555 if (!NeedPHI) {
1556 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1557 continue;
1558 }
1559
1560 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1561 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1562 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1563 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1564 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1565 for (auto *I : Insts)
1566 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1567 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1568 }
1569
1570 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1571 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1572 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1573 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1574 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1575
Robert Lougher6ea759a2016-12-15 16:59:13 +00001576 // Update metadata and IR flags.
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001577 for (auto *I : Insts)
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001578 if (I != I0) {
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001579 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I);
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001580 I0->andIRFlags(I);
1581 }
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001582
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001583 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1584 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1585 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1586 // instruction and nuke it.
1587 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1588 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1589 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1590 PN->eraseFromParent();
1591 }
1592
1593 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1594 for (auto *I : Insts)
1595 if (I != I0)
1596 I->eraseFromParent();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001597
1598 return true;
1599}
1600
1601namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001602
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001603 // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1604 // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1605 // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1606 // LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1607 // *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1608 // *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1609 // *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1610 // ...
1611 class LockstepReverseIterator {
1612 ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1613 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1614 bool Fail;
1615 public:
1616 LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) :
1617 Blocks(Blocks) {
1618 reset();
1619 }
1620
1621 void reset() {
1622 Fail = false;
1623 Insts.clear();
1624 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001625 Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1626 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1627 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1628 if (!Inst) {
1629 // Block wasn't big enough.
1630 Fail = true;
1631 return;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001632 }
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001633 Insts.push_back(Inst);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001634 }
1635 }
1636
1637 bool isValid() const {
1638 return !Fail;
1639 }
1640
1641 void operator -- () {
1642 if (Fail)
1643 return;
1644 for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001645 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1646 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
Benjamin Kramerd8b07972016-10-15 13:15:05 +00001647 // Already at beginning of block.
1648 if (!Inst) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001649 Fail = true;
1650 return;
1651 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001652 }
1653 }
1654
1655 ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1656 return Insts;
1657 }
1658 };
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001659
1660} // end anonymous namespace
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001661
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001662/// Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001663/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1664/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1665/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1666static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1667 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001668 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1669
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001670 // We support two situations:
1671 // (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
1672 // (2) one incoming arc is conditional
1673 //
1674 // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
1675 // else-if patterns;
1676 //
1677 // if (a) f(1);
1678 // else if (b) f(2);
1679 //
1680 // produces:
1681 //
1682 // [if]
1683 // / \
1684 // [f(1)] [if]
1685 // | | \
1686 // | | \
1687 // | [f(2)]|
1688 // \ | /
1689 // [ end ]
1690 //
1691 // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
1692 // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
1693 // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
1694 //
1695 // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
1696 // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
1697 // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
1698 // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
1699 //
1700 // [if]
1701 // / \
1702 // [x(1)] [if]
1703 // | | \
1704 // | | \
1705 // | [x(2)] |
1706 // \ / |
1707 // [sink.split] |
1708 // \ /
1709 // [ end ]
1710 //
1711 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
1712 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
1713 for (auto *B : predecessors(BBEnd)) {
1714 auto *T = B->getTerminator();
1715 if (isa<BranchInst>(T) && cast<BranchInst>(T)->isUnconditional())
1716 UnconditionalPreds.push_back(B);
1717 else if ((isa<BranchInst>(T) || isa<SwitchInst>(T)) && !Cond)
1718 Cond = T;
1719 else
1720 return false;
1721 }
1722 if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001723 return false;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001724
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001725 bool Changed = false;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001726 // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
1727 // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
1728 // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
1729 // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
1730 // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
1731 // PHIOperands.
1732 unsigned ScanIdx = 0;
1733 SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
1734 DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001735 LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001736 while (LRI.isValid() &&
1737 canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
1738 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0] << "\n");
1739 InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
1740 ++ScanIdx;
1741 --LRI;
1742 }
1743
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001744 auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001745 unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
1746 for (auto *I : *LRI)
1747 for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I])
1748 if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
1749 ++NumPHIdValues;
1750 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
1751 unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
1752 if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
1753 NumPHIInsts++;
1754
1755 return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
1756 };
1757
1758 if (ScanIdx > 0 && Cond) {
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001759 // Check if we would actually sink anything first! This mutates the CFG and
1760 // adds an extra block. The goal in doing this is to allow instructions that
1761 // couldn't be sunk before to be sunk - obviously, speculatable instructions
1762 // (such as trunc, add) can be sunk and predicated already. So we check that
1763 // we're going to sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
1764 LRI.reset();
1765 unsigned Idx = 0;
1766 bool Profitable = false;
1767 while (ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) && Idx < ScanIdx) {
1768 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
1769 Profitable = true;
1770 break;
1771 }
1772 --LRI;
1773 ++Idx;
1774 }
1775 if (!Profitable)
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001776 return false;
1777
1778 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
1779 // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
1780 // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
1781 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BI1->getSuccessor(0), UnconditionalPreds,
1782 ".sink.split"))
1783 // Edges couldn't be split.
1784 return false;
1785 Changed = true;
1786 }
1787
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001788 // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
1789 // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
1790 // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
1791 // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
1792 // per sunk instruction).
1793 //
1794 // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
1795 // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
1796 // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
1797 // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
1798 // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
1799 // This is unlikely in practice though.
1800 for (unsigned SinkIdx = 0; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
1801 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001802 << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001803 << "\n");
1804
1805 // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
1806 // sink is always at index 0.
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001807 LRI.reset();
1808 if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001809 // Too many PHIs would be created.
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001810 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001811 break;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001812 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001813
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001814 if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds))
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001815 return Changed;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001816 NumSinkCommons++;
1817 Changed = true;
1818 }
1819 return Changed;
1820}
1821
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001822/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1823/// conditional block.
1824///
1825/// We are looking for code like the following:
1826/// BrBB:
1827/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1828/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1829/// ... // function).
1830/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1831/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1832/// ThenBB:
1833/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1834/// br label EndBB
1835/// EndBB:
1836/// ...
1837/// We are going to transform this into:
1838/// BrBB:
1839/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1840/// ... //
1841/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1842/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1843/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1844/// ...
1845///
1846/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1847/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001848static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1849 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001850 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1851 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001852 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001853
1854 // Volatile or atomic.
1855 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001856 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001857
1858 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1859
1860 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001861 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001862 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(*BrBB)) {
1863 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1864 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001865 // Skip debug info.
1866 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CurI))
1867 continue;
1868 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001869
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001870 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001871 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001872 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001873
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001874 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1875 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1876 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1877 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1878 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001879 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001880 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001881 }
1882
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001883 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001884}
1885
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001886/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001887///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001888/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1889/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1890/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1891/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1892/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1893///
1894/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1895/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1896/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1897/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1898///
1899///
1900/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1901/// \code
1902/// BB:
1903/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1904/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1905/// ThenBB:
1906/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001907/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001908/// EndBB:
1909/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1910/// ...
1911/// \endcode
1912///
1913/// Into this IR:
1914/// \code
1915/// BB:
1916/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1917/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1918/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1919/// ...
1920/// \endcode
1921///
1922/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001923static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001924 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001925 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1926 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1927 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1928 return false;
1929
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001930 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1931 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1932
1933 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1934 // to swap the select operands later.
1935 bool Invert = false;
1936 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1937 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1938 Invert = true;
1939 }
1940 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1941
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001942 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1943 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1944 // - They are defined in BB, and
1945 // - They have no side effects, and
1946 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1947 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1948
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001949 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001950 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1951 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001952 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001953 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001954 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001955 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001956 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001957 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1958 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001959
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001960 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001961 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001962 ++SpeculationCost;
1963 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001964 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001965
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001966 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001967 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1968 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1969 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001970 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001971 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001972 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1973 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001974 return false;
1975
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001976 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1977 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1978 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1979
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001980 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001981 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001982 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001983 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001984 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001985 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001986 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1987
1988 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001989 }
1990 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001991
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001992 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1993 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1994 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001995 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
1996 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
1997 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001998 I != E; ++I)
1999 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002000 ++SpeculationCost;
2001 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002002 return false;
2003 }
2004
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002005 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
2006 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002007 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002008 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002009 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2010 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002011
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002012 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002013 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002014 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002015 continue;
2016
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002017 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
2018 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
2019 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
2020 return false;
2021
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002022 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002023 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
2024 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
2025 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002026 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
2027
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002028 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
2029 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002030 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002031 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
2032 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002033 unsigned MaxCost =
2034 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002035 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002036 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002037
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00002038 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2039 // getting expanded into Instructions.
2040 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002041 // constant expression.
2042 ++SpeculationCost;
2043 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002044 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002045 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002046
2047 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
2048 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002049 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002050 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002051
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002052 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002053 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002054
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002055 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2056 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002057 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002058 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2059 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2060 if (Invert)
2061 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00002062 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
2063 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002064 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
2065 }
2066
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002067 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2068 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002069 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002070 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
2071
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00002072 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002073 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2074 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002075
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002076 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002077 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002078 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
2079 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
2080 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2081 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2082 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2083 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
2084
2085 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2086 if (OrigV == ThenV)
2087 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002088
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002089 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002090 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
2091 // destinations were inverted.
2092 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002093 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002094 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00002095 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
2096 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName(), BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002097 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2098 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002099 }
2100
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002101 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002102 return true;
2103}
2104
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002105/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002106static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
2107 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002108 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002109
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00002110 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002111 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2112 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002113 if (Size > 10)
2114 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002115 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002116
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002117 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002118 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002119 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
2120 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002121 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2122 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002123 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002124
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002125 // Looks ok, continue checking.
2126 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002127
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002128 return true;
2129}
2130
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002131/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
2132/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
2133/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002134static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002135 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2136 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00002137 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
2138 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002139 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
2140 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002141
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002142 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
2143 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00002144 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002145 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002146 }
2147
2148 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002149 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
2150 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002151
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002152 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00002153 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002154 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
2155 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
2156 }))
2157 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00002158
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002159 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
2160 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002161 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002162 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002163 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
2164 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002165
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002166 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
2167 // branch to RealDest.
2168 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
2169 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002170
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002171 if (RealDest == BB)
2172 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002173 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002174 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
2175 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002176
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002177 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
2178 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
2179 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
2180 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002181 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
2182 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
2183 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002184 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002185
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002186 // Update PHI nodes.
2187 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002188
2189 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
2190 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
2191 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
2192 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002193 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002194 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
2195 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
2196 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
2197 continue;
2198 }
2199 // Clone the instruction.
2200 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002201 if (BBI->hasName())
2202 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002203
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002204 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002205 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
2206 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002207 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2208 *i = PI->second;
2209 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002210
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002211 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002212 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002213 if (!BBI->use_empty())
2214 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2215 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
2216 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
2217 N = nullptr;
2218 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002219 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002220 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002221 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002222 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002223 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2224 if (N)
2225 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002226 }
2227
2228 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2229 // to EdgeBB instead.
2230 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
2231 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2232 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2233 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2234 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2235 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002236
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002237 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002238 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002239 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002240
2241 return false;
2242}
2243
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002244/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2245/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002246static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2247 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002248 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2249 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2250 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2251 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2252 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2253 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002254 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
2255 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2256 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002257 if (!IfCond ||
2258 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2259 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2260 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002261
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002262 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2263 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2264 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2265 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2266 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2267 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2268 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2269 if (NumPhis > 2)
2270 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002271
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002272 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2273 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2274 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002275 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002276 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2277 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002278 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2279 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002280
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002281 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2282 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002283 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002284 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002285 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002286 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002287 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002288
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002289 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002290 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002291 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002292 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002293 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002294 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002295
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002296 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002297 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2298 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002299 if (!PN)
2300 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002301
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002302 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2303 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2304 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2305 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2306 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2307 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2308 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002309
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002310 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2311 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2312 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2313 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002314 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002315 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2316 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2317 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002318 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002319 } else {
2320 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002321 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2322 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002323 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002324 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002325 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2326 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002327 return false;
2328 }
2329 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002330
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002331 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002332 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002333 } else {
2334 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002335 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !isa<TerminatorInst>(I);
2336 ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002337 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002338 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002339 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2340 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002341 return false;
2342 }
2343 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002344
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00002345 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002346 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002347
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002348 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2349 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002350 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002351 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002352
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002353 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2354 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002355 if (IfBlock1) {
2356 for (auto &I : *IfBlock1)
2357 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002358 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002359 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002360 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002361 }
2362 if (IfBlock2) {
2363 for (auto &I : *IfBlock2)
2364 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002365 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002366 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002367 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002368 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002369
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002370 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2371 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002372 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002373 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002374
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002375 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2376 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2377 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002378 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002379 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002380
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002381 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2382 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2383 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2384 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002385 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2386 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002387 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002388 return true;
2389}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002390
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002391/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2392/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002393/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002394static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002395 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002396 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2397 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2398 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2399 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2400 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002401
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002402 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2403 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2404 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002405 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002406 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002407 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002408 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002409
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002410 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002411 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2412 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2413 // branch into a return.
2414 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2415 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2416 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002417 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002418 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002419 return true;
2420 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002421
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002422 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2423 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2424 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2425 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002426
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002427 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2428 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2429 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2430 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2431 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2432 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2433 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002434
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002435 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2436 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2437 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2438 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2439 // safe.
2440 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2441 if (TCV->canTrap())
2442 return false;
2443 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2444 if (FCV->canTrap())
2445 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002446
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002447 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2448 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2449 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2450 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002451
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002452 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2453 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002454 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002455 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002456 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2457 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2458 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2459 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002460 TrueValue =
2461 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002462 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002463 }
2464
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002465 Value *RI =
2466 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002467
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002468 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002469
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002470 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002471 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002472 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002473
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002474 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2475
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002476 return true;
2477}
2478
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002479/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002480/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00002481static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002482 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2483 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002484 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2485 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002486 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2487 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2488 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2489 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2490 return true;
2491 }
2492 }
2493 return false;
2494}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002495
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002496/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2497/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2498/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2499static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2500 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2501 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2502 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2503 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2504 bool PredHasWeights =
2505 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2506 bool SuccHasWeights =
2507 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2508 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2509 if (!PredHasWeights)
2510 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2511 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2512 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2513 return true;
2514 } else {
2515 return false;
2516 }
2517}
2518
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002519/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2520/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2521/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002522bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002523 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002524
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002525 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002526 if (BI->isConditional())
2527 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2528 else {
2529 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2530 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2531 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2532 // predecessor.
2533 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2534 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2535 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2536 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2537 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002538 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002539 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002540 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2541 Cond = Curr;
2542 break;
2543 }
2544 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2545 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2546 return false;
2547 }
2548 }
2549
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002550 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002551 return false;
2552 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002553
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002554 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2555 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002556 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002557
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002558 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002559 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002560
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002561 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002562 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2563 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002564
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002565 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002566 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002567
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002568 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2569 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2570 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2571 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2572 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2573 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002574 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002575 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2576 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2577 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002578 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002579 return false;
2580 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2581 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2582 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2583 return false;
2584 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2585 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2586 // and Cond.
2587 ++NumBonusInsts;
2588 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2589 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2590 return false;
2591 }
2592
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002593 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2594 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2595 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2596 if (CE->canTrap())
2597 return false;
2598 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2599 if (CE->canTrap())
2600 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002601
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002602 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002603 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002604 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002605 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2606 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002607
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002608 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2609 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002610 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002611
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002612 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2613 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2614 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002615 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002616 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002617 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002618 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2619 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002620 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002621
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002622 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002623 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002624 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002625
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002626 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002627 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002628 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002629 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002630 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002631 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2632 Opc = Instruction::And;
2633 InvertPredCond = true;
2634 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2635 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2636 InvertPredCond = true;
2637 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002638 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002639 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002640 } else {
2641 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2642 continue;
2643 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002644
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002645 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002646 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002647
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002648 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2649 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002650 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002651
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002652 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2653 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2654 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2655 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002656 NewCond =
2657 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002658 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002659
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002660 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002661 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002662 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002663
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002664 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002665 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002666 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2667 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2668 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002669 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002670 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002671 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002672 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2673 continue;
2674 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2675 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002676 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002677 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002678
2679 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2680 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2681 // only given the branch precondition.
2682 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2683 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002684 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002685
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002686 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2687 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002688 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002689 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002690
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002691 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2692 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002693 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002694 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002695 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002696 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), New);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002697 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002698 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002699
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002700 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002701 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
2702 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002703 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2704
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002705 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002706 bool HasWeights =
2707 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2708 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002709 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2710
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002711 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002712 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002713 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2714 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002715 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002716 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002717 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002718 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2719 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2720 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002721 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2722 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2723 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002724 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002725 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2726 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2727 }
2728 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002729 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002730 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2731 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002732 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002733 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002734 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2735 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2736 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2737 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002738 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2739 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002740 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2741 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2742 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002743 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2744 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2745 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2746
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002747 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2748 NewWeights.end());
2749 PBI->setMetadata(
2750 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2751 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002752 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002753 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002754 } else {
2755 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2756 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002757 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002758 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002759 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002760 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002761 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2762 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2763 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2764 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002765 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2766 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2767 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
2768 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002769 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002770 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2771 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002772 } else {
2773 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2774 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2775 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002776 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2777 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), New, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002778 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002779 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2780 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2781 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2782 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002783 }
2784 }
2785 // Update PHI Node.
2786 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2787 MergedCond);
2788 }
2789 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2790 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2791 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2792 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002793 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002794
Michael Kuperstein3ca147e2016-12-16 21:23:59 +00002795 // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
2796 // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
2797 if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
2798 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
2799
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002800 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2801 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2802
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002803 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002804 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2805 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2806 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002807
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002808 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002809 }
2810 return false;
2811}
2812
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002813// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2814// nullptr.
2815static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2816 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2817 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2818 if (!BB)
2819 continue;
2820 for (auto &I : *BB)
2821 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2822 if (S)
2823 // Multiple stores seen.
2824 return nullptr;
2825 else
2826 S = SI;
2827 }
2828 }
2829 return S;
2830}
2831
2832static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2833 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2834 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2835 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2836 //
2837 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2838 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2839 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2840 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2841 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2842 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2843 // one.
2844 //
2845 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2846 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2847 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2848 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2849 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002850
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002851 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2852 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2853 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2854 if (!AlternativeV)
2855 break;
2856
2857 assert(std::distance(pred_begin(Succ), pred_end(Succ)) == 2);
2858 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2859 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2860 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2861 break;
2862 PHI = nullptr;
2863 }
2864 if (PHI)
2865 return PHI;
2866
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002867 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2868 if (!AlternativeV &&
2869 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2870 return V;
2871
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002872 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002873 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2874 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2875 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002876 PHI->addIncoming(
2877 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002878 return PHI;
2879}
2880
2881static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2882 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2883 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
2884 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond) {
2885 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2886 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2887 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2888 };
2889
2890 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2891 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2892 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2893 if (!BB)
2894 return true;
2895 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2896 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2897 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002898 unsigned N = 0;
2899 for (auto &I : *BB) {
2900 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2901 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2902 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2903 ++N;
2904 // Free instructions.
2905 else if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) ||
2906 IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
2907 continue;
2908 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002909 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002910 }
2911 return N <= PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002912 };
2913
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002914 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2915 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2916 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002917 return false;
2918
2919 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2920 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2921 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2922 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2923 // testing.
2924 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2925 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2926 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2927 return false;
2928
2929 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2930 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2931 return false;
2932
2933 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2934 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2935 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2936 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2937 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2938 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2939 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2940 //
2941 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2942 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2943 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2944 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2945 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2946 return false;
2947 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2948 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2949 return false;
2950 if (QTB)
2951 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2952 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2953 return false;
2954 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2955 I != E; ++I)
2956 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2957 return false;
2958
2959 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
2960 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
2961 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2962 ->getCondition();
2963 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
2964 ->getCondition();
2965
2966 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
2967 PStore->getParent());
2968 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
2969 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
2970
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002971 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
2972
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002973 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
2974 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
2975
2976 if (InvertPCond)
2977 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
2978 if (InvertQCond)
2979 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
2980 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
2981
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002982 auto *T =
2983 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002984 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
2985 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
2986 AAMDNodes AAMD;
2987 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
2988 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
2989 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
2990
2991 QStore->eraseFromParent();
2992 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002993
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002994 return true;
2995}
2996
2997static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI) {
2998 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
2999 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
3000 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
3001 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
3002 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
3003 // PBI and QBI.
3004 //
3005 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
3006 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
3007 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
3008 // sequences can be if-converted away.
3009 //
3010 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
3011 //
3012 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
3013 // / \ | \
3014 // PTB PFB | PFB
3015 // \ / | /
3016 // QBI QBI
3017 // / \ | \
3018 // QTB QFB | QFB
3019 // \ / | /
3020 // PostBB PostBB
3021 //
3022 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
3023 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
3024 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003025 //
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003026 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
3027 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
3028 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
3029 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
3030 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
3031
3032 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
3033 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
3034 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
3035 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
3036 InvertPCond = true;
3037 }
3038 if (QFB == PostBB) {
3039 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3040 InvertQCond = true;
3041 }
3042
3043 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3044 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3045 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3046 PTB = nullptr;
3047 if (QTB == PostBB)
3048 QTB = nullptr;
3049
3050 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3051 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3052 // predecessor.
3053 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003054 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003055 };
3056 if (!PostBB ||
3057 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
3058 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3059 return false;
3060 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3061 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3062 return false;
3063 if (PostBB->getNumUses() != 2 || QBI->getParent()->getNumUses() != 2)
3064 return false;
3065
3066 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3067 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003068 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003069 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3070 if (!BB)
3071 continue;
3072 for (auto &I : *BB)
3073 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3074 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3075 }
3076 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3077 if (!BB)
3078 continue;
3079 for (auto &I : *BB)
3080 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3081 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3082 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003083
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003084 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3085 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3086 // clear what it contains.
3087 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3088
3089 bool Changed = false;
3090 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3091 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
3092 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond);
3093 return Changed;
3094}
3095
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003096/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
3097/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003098/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
3099/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003100static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3101 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003102 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
3103 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00003104
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003105 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003106 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003107 // this conditional branch redundant.
3108 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3109 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3110 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
3111 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
3112 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
3113 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
3114 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003115 BI->setCondition(
3116 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
3117 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003118 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003119
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003120 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
3121 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
3122 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
3123 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003124 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003125 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
3126 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
3127 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00003128 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
3129 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
3130 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003131 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003132 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003133 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
3134 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003135 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3136 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003137 NewPN->addIncoming(
3138 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
3139 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003140 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003141 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003142 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003143 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003144
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003145 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003146 return true;
3147 }
3148 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003149
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003150 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
3151 if (CE->canTrap())
3152 return false;
3153
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003154 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
3155 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
3156 // merged store at the end.
3157 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
3158 return true;
3159
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003160 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00003161 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003162 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00003163 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
3164 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
3165 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
3166 ++BBI;
3167 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003168 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00003169
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003170 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003171 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3172 PBIOp = 0;
3173 BIOp = 0;
3174 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3175 PBIOp = 0;
3176 BIOp = 1;
3177 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3178 PBIOp = 1;
3179 BIOp = 0;
3180 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3181 PBIOp = 1;
3182 BIOp = 1;
3183 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003184 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003185 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003186
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003187 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
3188 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
3189 // keep getting unwound.
3190 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
3191 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003192
3193 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003194 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
3195 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003196
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003197 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
3198 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
3199 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
3200
3201 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003202 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003203 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
3204 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003205 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3206 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003207
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003208 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3209 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3210 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3211 if (CE->canTrap())
3212 return false;
3213
3214 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3215 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3216 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3217 if (CE->canTrap())
3218 return false;
3219 }
3220
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003221 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003222 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003223
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003224 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00003225 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003226
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003227 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3228 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3229 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3230 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3231 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3232 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3233 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3234 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3235 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3236 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003237 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3238 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003239 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3240 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003241 }
3242
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003243 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003244
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003245 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3246 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003247
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003248 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3249 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003250 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003251 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003252 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003253
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003254 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3255 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003256 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003257
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003258 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003259 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003260
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003261 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3262 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3263 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3264 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003265
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003266 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3267 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003268 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003269 bool HasWeights =
3270 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3271 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003272 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003273 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3274 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3275 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3276 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003277 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3278 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3279 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003280 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3281 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3282 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003283 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003284 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3285
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003286 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003287 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3288 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003289 }
3290
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003291 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3292 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003293 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003294
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003295 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3296 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3297 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3298 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003299 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003300 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
3301 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
3302 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3303 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3304 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3305 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3306 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003307 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3308 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003309 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003310 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3311 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3312 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3313 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003314 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003315 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3316 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3317 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3318 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3319 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3320 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3321 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3322 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3323
3324 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3325
3326 NV->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3327 MDBuilder(BI->getContext())
3328 .createBranchWeights(NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]));
3329 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003330 }
3331 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003332
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00003333 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3334 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003335
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003336 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3337 // one fewer predecessor.
3338 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003339}
3340
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003341// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3342// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003343// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3344// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3345// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3346static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003347 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3348 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003349 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003350 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3351 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3352 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3353 // successor.
3354 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003355 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003356
3357 // Then remove the rest.
Pete Cooperebcd7482015-08-06 20:22:46 +00003358 for (BasicBlock *Succ : OldTerm->successors()) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003359 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3360 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003361 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003362 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003363 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003364 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003365 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3366 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003367 }
3368
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003369 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3370 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3371
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003372 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003373 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003374 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3375 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3376 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003377 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003378 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003379 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3380 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003381 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3382 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
3383 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003384 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext())
3385 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003386 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003387 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3388 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3389 // terminator must be unreachable.
3390 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3391 } else {
3392 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3393 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3394 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003395 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003396 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003397 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003398 else
3399 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003400 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003401 }
3402
3403 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3404 return true;
3405}
3406
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003407// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003408// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3409// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3410// unconditional otherwise.
3411static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3412 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3413 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3414 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3415 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3416 return false;
3417
3418 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3419 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003420 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
3421 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003422
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003423 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3424 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3425 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3426 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3427 if (HasWeights) {
3428 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3429 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003430 TrueWeight =
3431 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
3432 FalseWeight =
3433 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003434 }
3435 }
3436
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003437 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003438 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3439 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003440}
3441
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003442// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003443// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3444// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3445// with
3446// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3447static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3448 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3449 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3450 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3451 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3452 return false;
3453
3454 // Extract the actual blocks.
3455 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3456 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3457
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003458 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003459 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3460 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003461}
3462
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003463/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3464/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003465/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3466/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3467/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3468/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3469/// like:
3470///
3471/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3472/// DEFAULT:
3473/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3474/// br label %end
3475/// end:
3476/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003477///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003478/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3479/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003480static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003481 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00003482 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003483 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003484
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003485 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3486 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003487 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3488 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003489
3490 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3491 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003492
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003493 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3494 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3495 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3496 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003497 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3498 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003499
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003500 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3501 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3502 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003503
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003504 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3505 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3506 // away.
3507 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3508 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3509 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3510 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003511
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003512 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003513 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003514 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3515 }
3516 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00003517 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003518 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003519
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003520 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3521 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3522 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003523 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003524 Value *V;
3525 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3526 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3527 else
3528 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003529
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003530 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3531 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3532 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00003533 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003534 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003535
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003536 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3537 // the block.
3538 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003539 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003540 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003541 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3542 return false;
3543
3544 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3545 // true in the PHI.
3546 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003547 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003548
3549 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3550 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3551
3552 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3553 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3554 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3555 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3556
3557 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3558 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003559 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3560 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003561 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3562 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3563 if (HasWeights) {
3564 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3565 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3566 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003567 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003568 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3569
3570 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003571 SI->setMetadata(
3572 LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3573 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003574 }
3575 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003576 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003577
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003578 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003579 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3580 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3581 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003582 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3583 return true;
3584}
3585
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003586/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003587/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3588/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003589static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3590 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003591 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003592 if (!Cond)
3593 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003594
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003595 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3596 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3597 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003598
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003599 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003600 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3601 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003602 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003603 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3604 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3605 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003606
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003607 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003608 if (!CompVal)
3609 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003610
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003611 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3612 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3613 return false;
3614
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003615 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3616
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003617 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3618 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3619 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3620 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003621
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003622 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003623 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003624 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3625 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003626
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003627 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3628 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3629
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003630 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3631 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003632 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3633 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3634 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003635
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003636 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003637
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003638 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003639 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3640 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003641
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003642 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3643 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3644 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3645 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003646 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3647 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003648 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3649 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003650 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3651
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003652 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003653 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003654 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003655 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003656
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003657 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003658
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003659 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3660 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003661 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003662
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003663 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003664 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003665 BB = NewBB;
3666 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003667
3668 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003669 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3670 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003671 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3672 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003673 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003674
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003675 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003676 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003677
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003678 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3679 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3680 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003681
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003682 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3683 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3684 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003685 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003686 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3687 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003688 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003689 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3690 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003691
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003692 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3693 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003694
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003695 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003696 return true;
3697}
3698
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003699bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003700 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3701 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3702 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3703 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3704 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3705 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003706
3707 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003708}
3709
3710// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3711bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3712 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3713
3714 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3715 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3716 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003717 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003718 while (++I != E)
3719 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3720 return false;
3721
3722 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
3723 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3724
3725 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003726 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3727 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003728 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3729 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3730
3731 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3732 // it has other dependents.
3733 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3734 continue;
3735
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003736 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003737 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3738 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3739 continue;
3740
3741 bool isTrivial = true;
3742
3743 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3744 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3745 while (++I != E)
3746 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3747 isTrivial = false;
3748 break;
3749 }
3750
3751 if (isTrivial)
3752 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3753 }
3754
3755 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003756 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3757 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003758
3759 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3760 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3761 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3762 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3763 // to remove them all.
3764 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3765 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3766
3767 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3768 PI != PE;) {
3769 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3770 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3771 }
3772
3773 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3774 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3775 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3776 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3777 // predecessors.
3778 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3779 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3780 }
3781
3782 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3783 if (pred_empty(BB))
3784 BB->eraseFromParent();
3785
3786 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3787}
3788
3789// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3790bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003791 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3792 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003793 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3794 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003795
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003796 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3797 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003798 while (++I != E)
3799 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3800 return false;
3801
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003802 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003803 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3804 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3805 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003806 }
3807
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003808 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3809 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003810 if (LoopHeaders)
3811 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003812 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003813}
3814
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003815static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003816 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3817 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3818 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3819 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3820 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3821 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3822 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3823 // simplified.
3824 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003825 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3826 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003827 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3828 return false;
3829
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003830 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3831 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3832 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3833 return false;
3834
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003835 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003836 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003837 while (++I != E) {
3838 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3839 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003840 return false;
3841
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003842 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3843 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3844 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3845 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
3846 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3847 break;
3848 default:
3849 return false;
3850 }
3851 }
3852
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003853 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3854 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003855 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003856 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003857
3858 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3859 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3860 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3861 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3862 // are both EH pads).
3863 if (UnwindDest) {
3864 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3865 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003866 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003867 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003868 I != IE; ++I) {
3869 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003870
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003871 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003872 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003873 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003874 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3875 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3876 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3877 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3878 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3879 // pad being removed.
3880 //
3881 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3882 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3883 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3884 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3885 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3886 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3887
3888 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3889 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3890
3891 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3892 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3893 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3894 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003895 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003896 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003897 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3898 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3899 }
3900 } else {
3901 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3902 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3903 // predecessors with this value.
3904 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3905 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3906 }
3907 }
3908 }
3909
3910 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003911 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003912 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3913 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003914 I != IE;) {
3915 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3916 // being moved to another block.
3917 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3918 if (PN->use_empty())
3919 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3920 // when we erase BB below.
3921 continue;
3922
3923 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3924 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3925 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3926 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3927 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3928 if (pred != BB)
3929 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3930 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3931 }
3932 }
3933
3934 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3935 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3936 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003937 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003938 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003939 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003940 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003941 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003942 }
3943 }
3944
3945 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
3946 BB->eraseFromParent();
3947 return true;
3948}
3949
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003950// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
3951static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
3952 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
3953 // with.
3954 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
3955 if (!UnwindDest)
3956 return false;
3957
3958 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
3959 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
3960 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
3961 return false;
3962
3963 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
3964 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
3965 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
3966 return false;
3967
3968 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
3969 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
3970 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
3971 // funclet bundle operands.
3972 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
3973 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
3974 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
3975 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
3976 // destination.
3977 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
3978 RI->eraseFromParent();
3979
3980 return true;
3981}
3982
3983bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00003984 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
3985 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
3986 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
3987 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
3988 return false;
3989
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003990 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003991 return true;
3992
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003993 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003994 return true;
3995
3996 return false;
3997}
3998
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00003999bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004000 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004001 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
4002 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004003
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004004 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004005 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
4006 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004007 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
4008 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004009 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
4010 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
4011 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4012 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
4013 else
4014 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
4015 }
4016 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004017
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004018 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004019 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004020 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4021 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
4022 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004023 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004024 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004025 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004026
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004027 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004028 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004029 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4030 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004031 if (LoopHeaders)
4032 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004033 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004034
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004035 return true;
4036 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004037
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004038 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
4039 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
4040 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
4041 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4042 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004043
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004044 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
4045 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
4046 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004047 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004048 return true;
4049 }
4050 return false;
4051}
4052
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004053bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4054 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004055
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004056 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004057
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004058 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4059 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004060 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4061 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004062 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004063 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
4064 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
4065 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004066 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4067 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004068
4069 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004070 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004071 if (SI->isVolatile())
4072 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004073 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004074 if (LI->isVolatile())
4075 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004076 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004077 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
4078 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004079 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004080 if (CXI->isVolatile())
4081 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004082 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
4083 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
4084 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
4085 // default.
4086 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
4087 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
4088 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
4089 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004090 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
4091 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004092 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004093 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00004094 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
4095 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
4096 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
4097 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004098 }
4099
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00004100 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4101 if (!BBI->use_empty())
4102 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004103 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004104 Changed = true;
4105 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004106
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004107 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4108 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004109 if (&BB->front() != UI)
4110 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004111
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004112 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004113 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4114 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004115 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004116 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004117 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
4118 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4119 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4120 TI->eraseFromParent();
4121 Changed = true;
4122 }
4123 } else {
4124 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004125 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004126 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4127 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004128 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004129 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4130 Changed = true;
4131 }
4132 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004133 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004134 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;
4135 ++i)
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004136 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004137 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4138 SI->removeCase(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004139 --i;
4140 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004141 Changed = true;
4142 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004143 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
4144 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4145 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4146 Changed = true;
4147 }
4148 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
4149 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4150 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4151 Changed = true;
4152 continue;
4153 }
4154
4155 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
4156 E = CSI->handler_end();
4157 I != E; ++I) {
4158 if (*I == BB) {
4159 CSI->removeHandler(I);
4160 --I;
4161 --E;
4162 Changed = true;
4163 }
4164 }
4165 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
4166 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
4167 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
4168 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
4169 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
4170 } else {
4171 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
4172 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
4173 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
4174 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
4175 }
4176 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
4177 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
4178 CSI->eraseFromParent();
4179 Changed = true;
4180 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00004181 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004182 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4183 TI->eraseFromParent();
4184 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004185 }
4186 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004187
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004188 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004189 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004190 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
4191 BB->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004192 if (LoopHeaders)
4193 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004194 return true;
4195 }
4196
4197 return Changed;
4198}
4199
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004200static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
4201 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
4202
4203 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4204 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4205 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4206 return false;
4207 }
4208 return true;
4209}
4210
4211/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4212/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004213static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004214 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004215
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004216 bool HasDefault =
4217 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004218
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004219 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4220 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4221 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004222 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4223 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004224
4225 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I : SI->cases()) {
4226 BasicBlock *Dest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004227 if (!DestA)
4228 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004229 if (Dest == DestA) {
4230 CasesA.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
4231 continue;
4232 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004233 if (!DestB)
4234 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004235 if (Dest == DestB) {
4236 CasesB.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
4237 continue;
4238 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004239 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004240 }
4241
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004242 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4243 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004244 assert(DestA != DestB);
4245 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4246 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4247 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4248
4249 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4250 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4251 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4252 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4253 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4254 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4255 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4256 OtherDest = DestB;
4257 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4258 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4259 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4260 OtherDest = DestA;
4261 } else
4262 return false;
4263
4264 // Start building the compare and branch.
4265
4266 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004267 Constant *NumCases =
4268 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004269
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004270 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4271 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004272 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4273
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004274 Value *Cmp;
4275 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004276 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004277 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4278 else
4279 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004280 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004281
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004282 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004283 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4284 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004285 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4286 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004287 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4288 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4289 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4290 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4291 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4292 else
4293 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4294 }
4295 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4296 TrueWeight /= 2;
4297 FalseWeight /= 2;
4298 }
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004299 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004300 MDBuilder(SI->getContext())
4301 .createBranchWeights((uint32_t)TrueWeight,
4302 (uint32_t)FalseWeight));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004303 }
4304 }
4305
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004306 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4307 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4308 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004309 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4310 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004311 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004312 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4313 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004314 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4315 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004316 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4317 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004318 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4319 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4320 }
4321
4322 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004323 SI->eraseFromParent();
4324
4325 return true;
4326}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004327
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004328/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004329/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00004330static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004331 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004332 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004333 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00004334 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004335
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004336 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4337 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4338 // bits are in the condition value.
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00004339 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, SI) - 1;
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004340 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4341
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004342 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004343 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004344 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004345 APInt CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
4346 if ((CaseVal & KnownZero) != 0 || (CaseVal & KnownOne) != KnownOne ||
4347 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004348 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004349 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004350 }
4351 }
4352
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004353 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4354 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004355 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4356 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004357 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004358 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4359 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
4360 Bits - (KnownZero.Or(KnownOne)).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004361 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004362 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004363 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004364 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004365 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004366 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4367 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004368 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4369 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004370 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4371 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4372 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4373 return true;
4374 }
4375
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004376 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4377 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4378 if (HasWeight) {
4379 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4380 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4381 }
4382
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004383 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004384 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
4385 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00004386 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004387 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004388 if (HasWeight) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004389 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004390 Weights.pop_back();
4391 }
4392
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004393 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004394 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004395 SI->removeCase(Case);
4396 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004397 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004398 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
4399 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004400 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext())
4401 .createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004402 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004403
4404 return !DeadCases.empty();
4405}
4406
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004407/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4408/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004409/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4410/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4411/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4412static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004413 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004414 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004415 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004416 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004417 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004418
4419 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4420 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004421 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004422
4423 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4424
4425 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
4426 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4427 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
4428 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4429
4430 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004431 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4432 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004433
4434 *PhiIndex = Idx;
4435 return PHI;
4436 }
4437
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004438 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004439}
4440
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004441/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4442/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
4443/// blocks of the switch can be folded away.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004444/// Returns true if a change is made.
4445static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004446 typedef DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>> ForwardingNodesMap;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004447 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
4448
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004449 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E;
4450 ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00004451 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
4452 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004453
4454 int PhiIndex;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004455 PHINode *PHI =
4456 FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIndex);
4457 if (!PHI)
4458 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004459
4460 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
4461 }
4462
4463 bool Changed = false;
4464
4465 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004466 E = ForwardingNodes.end();
4467 I != E; ++I) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004468 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004469 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004470
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004471 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4472 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004473
4474 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
4475 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
4476 Changed = true;
4477 }
4478
4479 return Changed;
4480}
4481
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004482/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004483/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004484static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004485 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4486 return false;
4487 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4488 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004489
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004490 if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
4491 !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
4492 !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
4493 return false;
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004494
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004495 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004496 if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
4497 return false;
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004498 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
4499 return false;
4500 }
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004501
4502 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
4503 return false;
4504
4505 return true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004506}
4507
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004508/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004509/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004510static Constant *
4511LookupConstant(Value *V,
4512 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004513 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4514 return C;
4515 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4516}
4517
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004518/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004519/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4520/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004521/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004522static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004523ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4524 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004525 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004526 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4527 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004528 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004529 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4530 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4531 if (A->isNullValue())
4532 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004533 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004534 }
4535
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004536 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4537 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4538 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4539 COps.push_back(A);
4540 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004541 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004542 }
4543
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004544 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004545 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4546 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004547 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004548
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004549 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004550}
4551
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004552/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004553/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004554/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004555/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004556static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004557GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004558 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004559 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004560 const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004561 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4562 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4563
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004564 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4565 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004566 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004567 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
4568 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
4569 ++I) {
4570 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
4571 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
David Majnemer8c03c1b2016-10-07 01:38:35 +00004572 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1 || T->isExceptional())
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004573 return false;
4574 Pred = CaseDest;
4575 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
4576 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
4577 // Skip debug intrinsic.
4578 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004579 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&*I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004580 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004581
4582 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4583 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4584 // no longer dominate all its uses.
4585 for (auto &Use : I->uses()) {
4586 User *User = Use.getUser();
4587 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4588 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4589 continue;
4590 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4591 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4592 continue;
4593 return false;
4594 }
4595
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004596 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&*I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004597 } else {
4598 break;
4599 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004600 }
4601
4602 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4603 if (!*CommonDest)
4604 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4605 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4606 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4607 return false;
4608
4609 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
4610 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
4611 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
4612 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
4613 if (Idx == -1)
4614 continue;
4615
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004616 Constant *ConstVal =
4617 LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004618 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004619 return false;
4620
4621 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004622 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004623 return false;
4624
4625 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
4626 }
4627
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004628 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004629}
4630
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004631// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
4632// Result.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004633static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004634 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4635 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004636 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4637 if (I.first == Result) {
4638 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
4639 return;
4640 }
4641 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004642 UniqueResults.push_back(
4643 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004644}
4645
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004646// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004647// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4648// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4649// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004650static bool InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI,
4651 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4652 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4653 Constant *&DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004654 const DataLayout &DL,
4655 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004656 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4657 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4658
4659 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4660 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4661 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004662 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004663 return false;
4664
4665 // Only one value per case is permitted
4666 if (Results.size() > 1)
4667 return false;
4668 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4669
4670 // Check the PHI consistency.
4671 if (!PHI)
4672 PHI = Results[0].first;
4673 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4674 return false;
4675 }
4676 // Find the default result value.
4677 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4678 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4679 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004680 DL, TTI);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004681 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4682 // is unreachable.
4683 DefaultResult =
4684 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4685 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004686 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004687 return false;
4688
4689 return true;
4690}
4691
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004692// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4693// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004694// Example:
4695// switch (a) {
4696// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4697// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4698// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4699// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4700// default:
4701// return 4;
4702// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004703static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4704 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4705 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004706 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004707 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004708 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4709 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4710 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4711 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4712 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4713 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4714
4715 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4716 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4717 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4718 Value *const ValueCompare =
4719 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4720 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4721 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4722 }
4723 Value *const ValueCompare =
4724 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004725 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4726 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004727 }
4728
4729 return nullptr;
4730}
4731
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004732// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4733// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004734static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4735 Value *SelectValue,
4736 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4737 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4738 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4739 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4740 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4741
4742 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4743
4744 // Remove the switch.
4745 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4746 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4747
4748 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4749 continue;
4750 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4751 }
4752 SI->eraseFromParent();
4753}
4754
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004755/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004756/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4757/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
4758static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00004759 const DataLayout &DL,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004760 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004761 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4762 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4763 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4764 Constant *DefaultResult;
4765 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4766 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004767 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004768 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004769 return false;
4770 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4771 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4772 return false;
4773 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4774
4775 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004776 Value *SelectValue =
4777 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004778 if (SelectValue) {
4779 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4780 return true;
4781 }
4782 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4783 return false;
4784}
4785
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004786namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004787
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004788/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4789class SwitchLookupTable {
4790public:
4791 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4792 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4793 SwitchLookupTable(
4794 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4795 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4796 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004797
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004798 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4799 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4800 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004801
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004802 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4803 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4804 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4805 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004806
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004807private:
4808 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4809 // different ways.
4810 enum {
4811 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4812 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4813 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004814
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004815 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4816 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4817 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4818 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004819
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004820 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4821 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4822 // shift and mask operations.
4823 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004824
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004825 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4826 // instructions from the table.
4827 ArrayKind
4828 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004829
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004830 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
4831 Constant *SingleValue;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004832
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004833 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
4834 ConstantInt *BitMap;
4835 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004836
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004837 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
4838 ConstantInt *LinearOffset;
4839 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004840
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004841 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
4842 GlobalVariable *Array;
4843};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004844
4845} // end anonymous namespace
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004846
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004847SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4848 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4849 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
4850 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004851 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004852 LinearOffset(nullptr), LinearMultiplier(nullptr), Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004853 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4854 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004855
4856 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004857 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004858
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004859 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4860
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004861 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004862 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004863 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4864 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4865 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004866 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004867
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004868 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004869 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4870
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004871 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004872 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004873 }
4874
4875 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004876 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004877 assert(DefaultValue &&
4878 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004879 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004880 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4881 if (!TableContents[I])
4882 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004883 }
4884
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004885 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004886 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004887 }
4888
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004889 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4890 // that single value.
4891 if (SingleValue) {
4892 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4893 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004894 }
4895
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004896 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4897 // table index.
4898 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4899 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4900 APInt PrevVal;
4901 APInt DistToPrev;
4902 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4903 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4904 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4905 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4906 if (!ConstVal) {
4907 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4908 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4909 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4910 break;
4911 }
4912 APInt Val = ConstVal->getValue();
4913 if (I != 0) {
4914 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4915 if (I == 1) {
4916 DistToPrev = Dist;
4917 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4918 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4919 break;
4920 }
4921 }
4922 PrevVal = Val;
4923 }
4924 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
4925 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
4926 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
4927 Kind = LinearMapKind;
4928 ++NumLinearMaps;
4929 return;
4930 }
4931 }
4932
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004933 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004934 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004935 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004936 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
4937 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
4938 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00004939 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
4940 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
4941 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
4942 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
4943 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004944 }
4945 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
4946 BitMapElementTy = IT;
4947 Kind = BitMapKind;
4948 ++NumBitMaps;
4949 return;
4950 }
4951
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004952 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004953 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004954 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
4955
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004956 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
4957 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004958 "switch.table");
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00004959 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004960 Kind = ArrayKind;
4961}
4962
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004963Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004964 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004965 case SingleValueKind:
4966 return SingleValue;
4967 case LinearMapKind: {
4968 // Derive the result value from the input value.
4969 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
4970 false, "switch.idx.cast");
4971 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
4972 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
4973 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
4974 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
4975 return Result;
4976 }
4977 case BitMapKind: {
4978 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
4979 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004980
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004981 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
4982 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
4983 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
4984 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004985
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004986 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
4987 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
4988 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
4989 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004990
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004991 // Shift down.
4992 Value *DownShifted =
4993 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
4994 // Mask off.
4995 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
4996 }
4997 case ArrayKind: {
4998 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
4999 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
5000 uint64_t TableSize =
5001 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
5002 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
5003 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
5004 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
5005 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00005006
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005007 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
5008 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
5009 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
5010 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
5011 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005012 }
5013 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
5014}
5015
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005016bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005017 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00005018 Type *ElementType) {
5019 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005020 if (!IT)
5021 return false;
5022 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
5023 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005024
5025 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005026 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005027 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005028 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005029}
5030
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005031/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
5032/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005033static bool
5034ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
5035 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
5036 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00005037 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
5038 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005039
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005040 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005041 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005042 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
5043 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005044
5045 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005046 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005047
5048 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005049 AllTablesFitInRegister =
5050 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
5051 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005052
5053 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
5054 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
5055 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
5056 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005057 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005058 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005059
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005060 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
5061 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
5062 return true;
5063
5064 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
5065 if (HasIllegalType)
5066 return false;
5067
5068 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
5069 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
5070 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
5071 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005072}
5073
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005074/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
5075/// \code
5076/// if (idx < tablesize)
5077/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
5078/// else
5079/// r = default_value;
5080/// if (r != default_value)
5081/// ...
5082/// \endcode
5083/// Is optimized to:
5084/// \code
5085/// cond = idx < tablesize;
5086/// if (cond)
5087/// r = table[idx];
5088/// else
5089/// r = default_value;
5090/// if (cond)
5091/// ...
5092/// \endcode
5093/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005094static void reuseTableCompare(
5095 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
5096 Constant *DefaultValue,
5097 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005098
5099 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
5100 if (!CmpInst)
5101 return;
5102
5103 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
5104 // threading can do its work afterwards.
5105 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
5106 return;
5107
5108 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
5109 if (!CmpOp1)
5110 return;
5111
5112 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
5113 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
5114 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
5115
5116 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
5117 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5118 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
5119 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
5120 return;
5121
5122 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
5123 // compare result.
5124 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
5125 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005126 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005127 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst)
5128 return;
5129 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
5130 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
5131 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005132
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005133 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
5134 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
5135 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
5136 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
5137 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
5138 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
5139 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
5140 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
5141 return;
5142 }
5143
5144 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
5145 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
5146 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
5147 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5148 } else {
5149 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005150 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
5151 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
5152 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005153 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
5154 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5155 }
5156}
5157
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005158/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5159/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
5160/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005161static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5162 const DataLayout &DL,
5163 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005164 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005165
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00005166 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005167 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005168 return false;
5169
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005170 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
5171 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
5172
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005173 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
5174 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
5175 // string and lookup indices into that.
5176
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005177 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
5178 // them
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00005179 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
5180 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005181 return false;
5182
5183 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00005184 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005185 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
5186 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
5187 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
5188 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
5189
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005190 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005191 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4> ResultListTy;
5192 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
5193 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
5194 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
5195 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005196
5197 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
5198 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
5199 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5200 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
5201 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
5202 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
5203
5204 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005205 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> ResultsTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005206 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00005207 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005208 Results, DL, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005209 return false;
5210
5211 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005212 for (const auto &I : Results) {
5213 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5214 Constant *Value = I.second;
5215 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
5216 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5217 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005218 }
5219 }
5220
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005221 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005222 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005223 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5224 }
5225
5226 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5227 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5228 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5229 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5230
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005231 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5232 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005233 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005234 bool HasDefaultResults =
5235 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
5236 DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005237
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005238 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5239 if (NeedMask) {
5240 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005241 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005242 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005243 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005244 return false;
5245 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005246
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005247 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5248 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5249 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005250 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005251 }
5252
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005253 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005254 return false;
5255
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005256 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005257 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005258 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5259 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005260
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005261 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005262 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005263 Value *TableIndex =
5264 Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal, "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005265
5266 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5267 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005268 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005269 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005270 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5271 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5272 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5273
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005274 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5275 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5276 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5277 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5278 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5279 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005280 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5281
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005282 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005283 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005284 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5285 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005286 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005287 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5288 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5289 RangeCheckBranch =
5290 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005291 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005292
5293 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5294 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005295
5296 if (NeedMask) {
5297 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
5298 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
5299 // and we create a new LookupBB.
5300 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5301 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005302 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5303 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005304
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005305 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
5306 // unnecessary illegal types.
5307 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5308 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5309 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005310 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005311 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5312 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005313 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5314 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005315 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5316 }
5317 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5318
5319 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5320 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5321 // else continue with table lookup.
5322 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005323 Value *MaskIndex =
5324 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5325 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5326 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5327 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005328 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5329
5330 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5331 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5332 }
5333
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005334 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
5335 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
5336 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5337 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5338 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5339 }
5340
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005341 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005342 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
5343 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005344 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005345
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005346 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5347 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005348 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005349
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005350 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005351
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005352 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5353 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005354 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5355 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005356 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5357 ReturnedEarly = true;
5358 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005359 }
5360
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005361 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5362 // possible.
5363 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5364 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5365 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5366 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5367 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5368 }
5369 }
5370
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005371 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005372 }
5373
5374 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5375 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5376
5377 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005378 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005379 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005380
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005381 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005382 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005383 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5384 }
5385 SI->eraseFromParent();
5386
5387 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005388 if (NeedMask)
5389 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005390 return true;
5391}
5392
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005393static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5394 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5395 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5396 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5397 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5398 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5399 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005400
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005401 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5402}
5403
5404// Try and transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5405// of cases.
5406//
5407// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5408// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5409//
5410// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5411// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
5412static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5413 const DataLayout &DL,
5414 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5415 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5416 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5417 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5418 return false;
5419 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5420 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5421 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5422 return false;
5423
5424 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5425 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5426 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5427 // as signed.
5428 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5429 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5430 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
5431 std::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
5432
5433 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5434 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5435 return false;
5436
5437 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5438 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5439 for (auto &V : Values)
5440 V -= Base;
5441
5442 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5443 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5444 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5445 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5446 for (auto &V : Values)
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005447 GCD = GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005448
5449 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5450 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5451 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5452 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5453 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5454 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5455 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5456 // as the key function.
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005457 if (GCD <= 1 || !isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005458 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5459 return false;
5460
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005461 unsigned Shift = Log2_64(GCD);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005462 for (auto &V : Values)
5463 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5464
5465 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5466 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5467 return false;
5468
5469 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5470 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5471 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5472 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5473 //
5474 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5475 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5476 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5477 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005478
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005479 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5480 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5481 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5482 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005483 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5484 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5485 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005486 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5487
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005488 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt C = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); C != E;
5489 ++C) {
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005490 auto *Orig = C.getCaseValue();
5491 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005492 C.setValue(
5493 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005494 }
5495 return true;
5496}
5497
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005498bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005499 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5500
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005501 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5502 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5503 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5504 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5505 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005506 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005507
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005508 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5509 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5510 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005511 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005512
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005513 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5514 // away into any preds.
5515 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
5516 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5517 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
5518 ++BBI;
5519 if (SI == &*BBI)
5520 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005521 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005522 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005523
5524 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005525 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005526 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005527
5528 // Remove unreachable cases.
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005529 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, DL))
5530 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005531
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005532 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
5533 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005534
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005535 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005536 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005537
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005538 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005539 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005540
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005541 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005542 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005543
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005544 return false;
5545}
5546
5547bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5548 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5549 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005550
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005551 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5552 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5553 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5554 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005555 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005556 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5557 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005558 --i;
5559 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005560 Changed = true;
5561 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005562 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005563
5564 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5565 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5566 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5567 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5568 return true;
5569 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005570
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005571 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5572 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5573 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5574 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5575 return true;
5576 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005577
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005578 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5579 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005580 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005581 }
5582 return Changed;
5583}
5584
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005585/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5586/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5587/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5588/// a shared handler.
5589///
5590/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5591/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5592/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5593/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5594/// sinking in this file)
5595///
5596/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5597/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5598/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5599/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
5600/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't loose any ability to
5601/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5602///
5603/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5604/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5605/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5606static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5607 BasicBlock *BB) {
5608 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5609 assert(Succ);
5610 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5611 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5612 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5613 return false;
5614
5615 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5616 if (BB == OtherPred)
5617 continue;
5618 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5619 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5620 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5621 continue;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005622 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5623 }
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005624 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5625 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5626 continue;
5627
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005628 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005629 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
5630 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
5631 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5632 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5633 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005634 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5635 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005636 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5637 }
5638
5639 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5640 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005641 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5642 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5643 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005644 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5645 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5646 }
5647
5648 SmallSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
5649 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5650 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5651 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5652 }
5653
5654 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5655 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5656 BI->eraseFromParent();
5657 return true;
5658 }
5659 return false;
5660}
5661
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005662bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5663 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005664 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005665
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00005666 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
5667 return true;
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005668
5669 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
5670 // if LoopHeader is provided, check if the block is a loop header
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005671 // (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and vectorization
5672 // to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops.
5673 // These blocks can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later
5674 // in the back-end.)
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005675 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005676 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Hans Wennborge9134892016-04-11 20:35:01 +00005677 (!LoopHeaders || !LoopHeaders->count(BB)) &&
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005678 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
5679 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005680
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005681 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
5682 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
5683 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5684 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5685 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5686 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005687 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005688 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI,
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005689 BonusInstThreshold))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005690 return true;
5691 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005692
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005693 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5694 // equivalent.
5695 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005696 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) {
5697 }
5698 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005699 return true;
5700 }
5701
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005702 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5703 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5704 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5705 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005706 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005707 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005708 return false;
5709}
5710
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005711static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5712 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5713 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5714 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5715 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5716 return nullptr;
5717 PredPred = PPred;
5718 }
5719 return PredPred;
5720}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005721
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005722bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005723 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005724
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005725 // Conditional branch
5726 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5727 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5728 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5729 // switch.
5730 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005731 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005732 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005733
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005734 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5735 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5736 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
5737 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5738 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5739 ++I;
5740 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005741 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005742 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005743 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005744 ++I;
5745 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
5746 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
5747 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005748 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005749 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005750 }
5751 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005752
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005753 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005754 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005755 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005756
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005757 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5758 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5759 // of the BI branch.
5760 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5761 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5762 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
5763 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1) &&
5764 (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB)) {
5765 bool CondIsFalse = PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB;
5766 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
5767 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsFalse);
5768 if (Implication) {
5769 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5770 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5771 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5772 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5773 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5774 BI->setCondition(CI);
5775 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005776 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005777 }
5778 }
5779 }
5780
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005781 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5782 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5783 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005784 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, BonusInstThreshold))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005785 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005786
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005787 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5788 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5789 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5790 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005791 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5792 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005793 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005794 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005795 } else {
5796 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005797 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005798 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5799 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5800 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005801 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005802 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005803 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005804 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005805 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005806 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005807 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5808 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5809 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005810 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005811 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005812 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005813
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005814 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5815 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5816 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5817 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005818 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005819 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005820
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005821 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005822 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5823 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005824 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005825 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005826 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005827
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005828 // Look for diamond patterns.
5829 if (MergeCondStores)
5830 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5831 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5832 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
5833 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI))
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005834 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold) | true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005835
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005836 return false;
5837}
5838
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005839/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5840static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5841 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5842 if (!C)
5843 return false;
5844
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005845 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005846 return false;
5847
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005848 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005849 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005850 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005851
5852 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5853 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005854 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5855 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5856 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5857 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005858 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005859 return false;
5860
5861 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5862 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5863 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5864 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5865
5866 // Look through bitcasts.
5867 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5868 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5869
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005870 // Load from null is undefined.
5871 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005872 if (!LI->isVolatile())
5873 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005874
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005875 // Store to null is undefined.
5876 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005877 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005878 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 &&
5879 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005880
5881 // A call to null is undefined.
5882 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
5883 return CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005884 }
5885 return false;
5886}
5887
5888/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005889/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005890static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
5891 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
5892 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
5893 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5894 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
5895 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
5896 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5897 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
5898 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
5899 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5900 // destination from conditional branches.
5901 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5902 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5903 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005904 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5905 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005906 BI->eraseFromParent();
5907 return true;
5908 }
5909 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5910 }
5911
5912 return false;
5913}
5914
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005915bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00005916 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005917
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00005918 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005919 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005920
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005921 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
5922 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005923 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00005924 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00005925 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
5926 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
5927 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005928 }
5929
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005930 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
5931 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00005932 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005933
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00005934 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
5935 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
5936
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005937 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
5938 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
5939
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00005940 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
5941 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
5942 // if there are no PHI nodes.
5943 //
5944 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
5945 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005946
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00005947 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
5948
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005949 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
5950 // eliminate it, do so now.
5951 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
5952 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005953 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00005954
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005955 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005956 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005957 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005958 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
5959 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005960 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005961 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
5962 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005963 }
5964 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005965 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
5966 return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00005967 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005968 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
5969 return true;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00005970 } else if (CleanupReturnInst *RI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005971 dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5972 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
5973 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005974 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005975 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
5976 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005977 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005978 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5979 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
5980 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00005981 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005982 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
5983 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
5984 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00005985 }
5986
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00005987 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00005988}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005989
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005990/// This function is used to do simplification of a CFG.
5991/// For example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop,
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00005992/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
5993/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
5994///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005995bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005996 unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00005997 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005998 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(),
Hal Finkel3ca4a6b2016-12-15 03:02:15 +00005999 BonusInstThreshold, LoopHeaders)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006000 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006001}